Robert Bosch Car Multimedia LCN20A Radio Navigation System with Bluetooth User Manual 1093929 2013 asd own

Robert Bosch Car Multimedia GmbH Radio Navigation System with Bluetooth 1093929 2013 asd own

08 user guide

Download: Robert Bosch Car Multimedia LCN20A Radio Navigation System with Bluetooth User Manual 1093929 2013 asd own
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Robert Bosch Car Multimedia LCN20A Radio Navigation System with Bluetooth User Manual 1093929 2013 asd own
Document ID1763881
Application IDIBcICPPm20uvJgGUBtim6Q==
Document Description08 user guide
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize468.95kB (5861861 bits)
Date Submitted2012-08-10 00:00:00
Date Available2012-08-10 00:00:00
Creation Date2012-03-27 10:40:06
Producing SoftwareGPL Ghostscript 8.63
Document Lastmod2012-07-11 10:10:40
Document Title1093929-2013-asd-own
Document CreatorXyEnterprise XPP 8.3C.1 SP #2

JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 1 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
FOREWORD
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
In addition to factory installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed by NISSAN or by your
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning
proper use of such accessories prior to operating
the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN
dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 2 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety or durability, and
may
even
violate
governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and without obligation.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 3 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTHt is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Clarion.
SiriusXM Satellite
Radio requires subscription, sold separately. Not available
in Alaska, Hawaii or
Guam. For more
information, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
© 2012 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 4 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
information.centre@nissancanada.com
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 5 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
Index
10
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 6 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 7 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 8 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Per engineering comment,
pretensioners are not in
the buckle
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
11 12.
13.
12
Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-23)
Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-37)
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-37)
Head restraints (P. 1-7)
Front seat belts (P. 1-10)
Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s
side shown; passenger’s side similar)
(P. 1-52)
Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-37)
Seats (P. 1-2)
Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-45)
Pretensioners (P. 1-45)
Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-51)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-21)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
12
11
LII2041
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 9 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Power windows (P. 2-42)
Windshield (P. 8-21)
Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
Engine hood (P. 3-27)
Tie down (P. 6-12)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-29)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-30)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Tire pressure (P. 8-35)
Flat tire (P. 6-2)
Tire chains (P. 8-43)
Mirrors (P. 3-33)
Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™,
keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2038
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 10 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-29)
Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-29)
Trunk lid (P. 3-27)
Opener operation (P. 3-28)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-30, P. 9-3)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-30)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2039
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 11 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Interior trunk access (P. 1-6)
Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-45)
Sun visors (P. 3-32)
Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-47)
HomeLinkT universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-33)
7. Glove box (P. 2-41)
8. Cup holders (P. 2-40 )
9. Console box (P. 2-41)
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)
11. Rear seat (P. 1-6)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2040
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 12 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
LIC2369
1.
2.
3.
Instrument brightness control/Trip
computer reset switch (P. 2-34, P. 2-4)
Vents (P. 4-18)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-30)
4.
5.
6.
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-37, P. 2-35)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Paddle shift controls (if so equipped)
(P. 5-15)
19.
20.
21.
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-28)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-35)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-45)
Audio system controls/Navigation
system* (P. 4-30)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-37)
Glove box (P. 2-41)
Aux jack (P. 4-41, 4-47, 4-54)
Power outlet/USB port (P.2-38, 4-54,
4-56)
Heater and air conditioner (manual or
automatic) (P. 4-19, P. 4-27)
Shift selector (P. 5-13)
Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-8)
Cruise control main/set switch/
BluetoothT Hands-free Phone System
(P.5-19 / P. 4-96, P. 4-70, P. 4-85 )
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-32)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
/Vehicle information display controls
( P. 4-68, P. 2-17)
Fuel filler door release/Hood release)
(P. 3-30, P. 3-27)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 13 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
22.
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch
(P. 2-37)
Trunk opener (P. 3-27)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
* Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s manual
(if so equipped)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 14 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
Battery (P. 8-16)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
Drive belt location (P. 8-19)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir1 (P.
8-15)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI2111
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 15 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
VQ35DE engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-15)
Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
Battery (P. 8-16)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
Drive belt location (P. 8-19)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI2112
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 16 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
Name
Page
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light
2-10
Brake warning light
2-11
or
Warning
light
Name
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Indicator
light
Page
2-13
Name
Page
Fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
2-14
2-11
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-14
Charge warning
light
2-11
High beam indicator
light (blue)
2-14
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-13
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
2-14
Master warning light
2-13
Overdrive off indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-15
Power steering
warning light
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-13
Security indicator
light
2-15
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
2-15
Slip indicator light
2-15
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-16
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off
indicator light
2-16
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 17 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment —
(for passenger’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment
(for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact supplemental air bag
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Seat belts with pretensioners (Front seats) . . . . . . . 1-51
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 18 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SEATS
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
ARS1152
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT — (for passenger’s
seat)
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 19 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LRS2160
LRS2161
Forward and backward
Reclining
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 20 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
WRS0751
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(for driver’s seat)
Operating tips
WARNING
Before driving the vehicle, return the seatback to an upright seating position after
manually releasing it. Also, make sure the
seat is locked in place. Failure to do so
may cause the seat to move in a collision
or sudden stop. This may result in damage
to the seat or personal injury.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit, see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
position.
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 21 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WRS0740
Type A
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Type A: Pull up or push down the adjusting lever
to adjust the seat height until the desired position
is achieved.
LRS2162
Type B
WRS0743
Lumbar support (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Push the switch forward or
backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Type B: Push the switch up or down to adjust the
angle and height of the seat cushion.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 22 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
1. Move the front passenger seat to the most
forward position.
2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel
shelf.
1 on the rear
3. Push down on the button s
parcel shelf.
4. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback
2 .
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0166
FOLDING REAR SEAT
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger
side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as
shown.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 23 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
LRS2168
To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,
1 .
open the trunk and pull on the strap s
The rear seats can be locked using the mechanical key to prevent unauthorized access. For more
information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
WRS0167
Center armrest
Pull the armrest down until it rests on the seat
cushion.
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 24 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LRS2164
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints.
Cloth seat: The front seat head restraints are
adjustable and removable. The rear head restraints do not adjust or remove.
Leather seat: The front and rear outboard head
restraints are adjustable and removable. The center headrest is not removable and does not adjust.
LRS0887
Components
WRS0134
Adjustment
1. Head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
m Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 25 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LRS0888
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
LRS0889
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
LRS0890
Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the adjustable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 26 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SEAT BELTS
LRS0891
Install
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1 must be installed
the adjustment notches s
2 .
in the hole with the lock knob s
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 27 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SSS0134
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
SSS0016
WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 28 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
SSS0014
WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious personal injury.
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
● Removal and installation of pretensioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 29 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
● Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured
or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if
the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. If the seat belt
cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the
seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a
knife or scissors) to release the seat
belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 30 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WRS0751
Front seat shown
LRS0594
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 31 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
LRS0595
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 32 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. To
1 and
adjust, pull out the adjustment button s
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
2 , so the belt passes over the center of
position s
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 33 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a child’s neck
with the ALR mode activated, the child can
be seriously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If
the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child by
cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 34 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraint
● Forward-facing child restraint
● Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child restraints” later in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See “Child restraints” later in this section for
more information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the height
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. NISSAN
recommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 35 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CHILD RESTRAINTS
properly, the booster seat should raise the child
so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
a label certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has
grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near
the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper
thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WRS0256
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 36 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” later in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 37 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.
straint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
LRS2165
LATCH system anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 38 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WRS0796
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor point locations
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the
seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH anchors.
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 39 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0801
WRS0797
Top tether anchor point locations
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Installing top tether strap” later in this section.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
1 are located on the rear parcel
Anchor points s
shelf.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 40 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WRS0802
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 41 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0256
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 42 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 43 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LRS0670
Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
WRS0763
Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 44 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
WRS0799
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0800
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 45 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 46 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 6.
the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 47 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 48 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 49 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
WRS0475
Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
should illuminate. If this
status light
light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
LRS0798
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
1 from the anchor
1. Flip up the anchor cover s
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
2 .
the head restraint s
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
3 .
point on the rear parcel shelf s
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 50 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LRS0455
LRS0453
LRS0464
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 51 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1 is chosen, the
low back booster seat s
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2 should be used.
high back booster seat s
● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
WRS0699
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 52 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
LRS0454
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If
the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints” in this section for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
WRS0475
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 53 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning
the following systems:
● Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag
● Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front- impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side-impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact or rollover collisions. In a
side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
In a rollover, both curtain air bags are designed to
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 54 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
WRS0031
WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an Occupant Classification Sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 55 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
ARS1133
ARS1041
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 56 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
ARS1042
ARS1043
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
ARS1044
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 57 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
ARS1045
ARS1046
WRS0431
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for
details.
WARNING
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 58 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WARNING
SSS0162
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0032
WARNING
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 59 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SSS0159
SSS0162
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 60 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Per engineering comment,
pretensioners are not in
the buckle
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
11 12.
13.
12
12
Top tether strap anchor
Rear seat belts
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
Head restraints
Front seat belts
Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s
side shown; passenger’s side similar)
Supplemental front-impact air bags
Seats
Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor)
Buckle pretensioner
Seat belt with pretensioner
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system
11
LII2041
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 61 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced air bag system, please observe the following items.
● Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
● Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lb (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.
● Do not store luggage behind the seat
that can press into the seatback.
●
Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status light
may illuminate and the supplemental
air bag warning light may flash.
● If a forward facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do
not position the front passenger seat so
the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does
contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied
and the passenger air bag may deploy
in a collision. Also the front passenger
air bag status light may not illuminate.
See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for information about installing
and using child restraints.
● Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status light.
● If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating as described later in this section, please take
your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer to
check the occupant classification
system.
● Until you have confirmed with your
dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in the
rear seating positions.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and Occupant
Classification Sensor (weight sensor). Inflator
operation is based on the severity of a collision
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front
passenger, the occupant classification sensors
are also monitored. Based on information from
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 62 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
crash, depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag
may be automatically turned OFF under some
conditions, depending on the weight detected on
the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used.
If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the
seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in this
section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of
the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
WRS0475
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 63 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Status light
The front passenger air bag status light
is
located near the climate controls. After the ignition switch is placed in the 9ON9 position, the
front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off or remains illuminated depending
on the front passenger seat occupied status. The
light operates as follows:
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
is
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meet the conditions outlined in this section: The light
is OFF to indicate that
the front passenger air bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under the
front passenger seat and are designed to detect
an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the
Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the
passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the
regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type
specified in the regulations is on the seat, the
occupant classification sensors can detect it and
cause the air bag to turn OFF.
The front passenger seat belt sensor is designed
to detect if the seat belt is buckled. Based on the
weight on the seat detected by the occupant
classification sensor and the buckle state, the
Advanced Air Bag System determines whether
the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental
air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode may
allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section
for proper use and installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 64 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
passenger air bag status light will take a few
seconds to register a change in the passenger
seat status. For example, if a large adult who is
sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will go
from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to
OFF. This is normal system operation and does
not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
● Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such
objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors (weight sensors). This can affect the operation of
the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/27/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 65 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should
not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
● Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag and result in serious personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/27/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 66 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
LRS0259
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDEIMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN
SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR
BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. These systems
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air bag and
curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
these air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly
after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 67 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
● Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag system should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
SEAT BELTS WITH
PRETENSIONERS (Front seats)
WARNING
● The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner
system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
● Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioners help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 68 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The pretensioners are part of the seat belt retractor assembly . These seat belts are used the
same way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. (See 9SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT9 in this section for more details.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
LRS2163
1.
SRS air bag warning labels (located on
the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
in the instrument panel, monidisplaying
tors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners and all related wiring.
When the ignition is placed in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 69 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems
may not operate properly. They must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK
position when working under the hood or inside
the vehicle.
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioners or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a
NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and
pretensioners cannot be repaired.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 70 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-17
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-33
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 71 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Personal Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-49
Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Programming HomeLinkT for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Operating the HomeLinkT universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-52
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 72 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
LIC2369
1.
2.
3.
Instrument brightness control/Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-34, P. 2-4)
Vents (P. 4-18)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-30)
4.
5.
6.
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-37, P. 2-35)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Paddle shift controls (if so equipped)
(P. 5-15)
19.
20.
21.
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-28)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-35)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-45)
Audio system controls/Navigation
system* (P. 4-30)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-37)
Glove box (P. 2-41)
Aux jack (P. 4-41, 4-47, 4-54)
Power outlet/USB port (P.2-38, 4-54,
4-56)
Heater and air conditioner (manual or
automatic) (P. 4-19, P. 4-27)
Shift selector (P. 5-13)
Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-8)
Cruise control main/set switch/
BluetoothT Hands-free Phone System
(P.5-19 / P. 4-96, P. 4-70, P. 4-85 )
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-32)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
/Vehicle information display controls
( P. 4-68, P. 2-17)
Fuel filler door release/Hood release)
(P. 3-30, P. 3-27)
2-2 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 73 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
METERS AND GAUGES
22.
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch
(P. 2-37)
Trunk opener (P. 3-27)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
* Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s manual
(if so equipped)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LIC2254
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tachometer
Warning/indicator lights
Vehicle Information Display
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
7.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 74 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LIC2218
LIC2234
LIC2219
Changing the display:
TACHOMETER
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
3 switch on the left of
Pushing the TRIP RESET s
the instrument panel to change the display as
follows:
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
1 .
the red zone s
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Trip
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
1 and the twin trip odometer s
The odometer s
are displayed below the Vehicle Information Display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
→ Trip
→ Trip
Resetting the trip odometer:
3 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch s
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip
odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy and distance to empty
information is also available. See “Vehicle Information Display” in this section.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
2-4 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 75 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.
LIC2220
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1 when the gauge needle points
normal range s
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
LIC2222
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
Instruments and controls 2-5
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 76 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips. the
light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posibutton as described in the
tion, press the
chart below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Push and hold
Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 secthe
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
5 seconds
correct false compass readings
9 seconds
Compass enters calibration mode
For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
LIC1487
button for about 1 second when
Press the
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to
1 on or off. The
toggle the compass display s
display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
2-6 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 77 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
COMPASS DISPLAY
Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop
pressing the
button and the display will
show compass direction within a few seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Press the
button when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position. The direction will be
displayed.
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Establish your location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration. Record your zone
number.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
button in for 5 seconds until
3. Press the
the current zone entry number is displayed.
button repeatedly until the
4. Press the
desired zone entry number is displayed.
Instruments and controls 2-7
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 78 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● If a magnet is located near the compass or the vehicle is driven where the
terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the
compass display may not indicate the
correct direction.
● In places where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the correction of the
direction starts automatically.
Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the
switch for about 9 seconds. The
display will read “C.”
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles the display
should return to normal.
● If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment,
have the compass checked at an authorized
NISSAN dealer.
WIC0355
2-8 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 79 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● The compass may not indicate the correct
compass point in tunnels or while driving up
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns
to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 80 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or
Supplemental air bag warning light
Security indicator light
Charge warning light
Fog light indicator light (if so equipped)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
Low tire pressure warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
Slip indicator light
Master warning light
High beam indicator light (blue)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Power steering warning light
Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
Brake warning light
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
or
The following lights (if equipped) come on briefly
and then go off:
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking system is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 81 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” section.
or
Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
● If the brake fluid
MINIMUM or MIN
fluid reservoir, do
brake system has
NISSAN dealer.
level is below the
mark on the brake
not drive until the
been checked at a
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 82 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A
“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire Load and Information label located in
the driver’s door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically
turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted.
After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning is
active as long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and
in the “In case of emergency” section.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add
Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Starting and driving” section.
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch in the ON position, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
placard located in the driver’s door
opening to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If the light still
comes on while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 83 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Master warning light
When the ignition is in the ON position, the
master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information
display.
● No key warning
● Low fuel warning
● Low windshield-washer fluid warning
● Parking brake release warning
● Door/trunk open warning
● Loose fuel cap
● Check tire pressure warning
Power steering warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the power steering warning light illuminates. After
starting the engine, the hydraulic pump electric
power steering warning light turns off. This indicates that the electric power steering system is
operational. See “Power steering system” in the
“Starting and driving” section.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 84 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional details, see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light (
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are ON. See “Fog light switch”
later in this section.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 85 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if
the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the vehicle information display. If the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a few
light does not turn
driving trips. If the
off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.
Overdrive off indicator light (if
so equipped)
QR25DE:
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when
the overdrive off mode is selected.
VQ35DE:
This light illuminates and then turns off when the
ignition switch is placed to the ON position.
QR25DE and VQ35DE:
Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security systems” later in this section.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is
selected. See “Headlight and turn signal switch”
later in this section for further details.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or
the traction control system is operating, thus
alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.
For additional information, see “Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 86 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has
been turned off.
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will be
reactivated. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you push the push-button ignition switch to
the ON position. The light will turn off after about
2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light
stays on or comes on along with the
indicator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle
Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.
LIC2205
The vehicle information display is located to the
left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
● Vehicle settings
● Trip computer information
● Cruise control system information
NISSAN Intelligent KeyT door buzzer
● NISSAN Intelligent KeyT operation information
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section.
● Audio information
● Navigation - turn by turn (if so equipped)
● Indicators and warnings
● Tire Pressure information (if so equipped)
● Other information
2-16 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/27/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 87 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
3.
— select/enter the Vehicle information menu items or to change from one display screen to the next (i.e. trip, TPMS, Fuel
economy)
buttons also control audio
The ENTER and
and control panel functions. For additional information see, “Steering wheel switch for audio
control” in “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section.
STARTUP DISPLAY
LIC2322
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be changed
and ENTER located on
using the buttons
the steering wheel.
1.
2.
— navigate through the items in vehicle information
ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display
— go back to the previous menu
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display:
● Main Menu Selection
● Body Color
● Maintenance
● Alarms
● Vehicle Settings
● Language
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the vehicle
information include:
● Active system status (if so equipped)
● Trip computer
● Tire pressure information (if so equipped)
● Fuel economy
● Warnings
Warnings will only display if there are any present, for more information on warnings and indicators see, “Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators” in this section.
To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see “Main menu selection” in this
section.
● Unit
● Welcome Effects
● Factory Reset
Main Menu Selection
The items that display can be enabled/disabled
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. To change the items that display.
Use the
button to select and the ENTER
button to change a menu item:
● Trip Computer
● Audio
● Navigation (if so equipped)
● Fuel Economy
● Tire Pressures (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-17
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 88 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Trip Computer
Fuel Economy
The trip computer can be enabled/disabled to
display in the vehicle information display when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The fuel economy can be enabled/disabled to
display in the vehicle information display when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Trip
Computer” to display in the vehicle information
display when the ignition is placed in the ON
position.
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Fuel
Economy” to display in the vehicle information
display when the ignition is placed in the ON
position.
Audio
Tire Pressures (if so equipped)
The audio can be enabled/disabled to display in
the vehicle information display when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position to display the
radio information in the vehicle information display.
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Audio” to
display in the vehicle information display when
the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Navigation (if so equipped)
The navigation can be enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Navigation” to display in the vehicle information display
when turn-by-turn is used and the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
The tire pressures can be enabled/disabled to
display in the vehicle information display when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Tire
Pressures” to display in the vehicle information
display when the ignition is placed in the ON
position.
Body Color
The color of the vehicle that displays in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position can be changed.
LIC2370
1. scheduled service: oil and oil filter
2. tires
3. other
Maintenance
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
for the reminding of maintenance intervals. To
change an item:
1. Press the
button.
button until “Settings” is se2. Use the
lected, and press ENTER.
3. Select “Maintenance” using the
tons and press ENTER.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
but-
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 89 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Service
This indicator appears when the customer set
distance comes for changing the engine oil and
filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide.”
Tire
This indicator appears when the customer set
distance comes for replacing tires. You can set or
reset the distance for replacing tires.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. See “Changing
Wheels and Tires” in “Maintenance & DoIt-Yourself” section. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits
and road conditions affect tire wear and
when tires should be replaced. Setting the
tire replacement indicator for a certain
driving distance does not mean your tires
will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always
perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire
pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or death.
Other
This indicator appears when the customer set
distance comes for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter
and tires. Other maintenance items can include
such things as air filter or tire rotation. You can set
or reset the distance for checking or replacing
the items.
Alarms
This setting allows the customer to set alarms for
outside temperature and a timer alert.
1. Press the
button.
2. Use the
button until “Settings” is selected, and press ENTER.
3. Select “Alarms” using the
press ENTER.
buttons and
Outside Temperature
This setting allows the customer to
enable/disable the alert for low outside temperature in the vehicle information display.
1. Use the
buttons to select “Outside
Temperature”.
2. Press the ENTER button to turn ON/OFF
the outside temperature in the vehicle information display.
Timer Alert
This setting allows the customer to set an alert to
notify the driver that the set time has been
reached.
1. Use the
Alert”.
buttons to select “Timer
2. Press the ENTER button.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 90 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
3. To change the timer amount, use the
buttons and the ENTER button to save the
selected time amount.
Navigation (if so equipped)
This setting allows the customer to
enable/disable the alert for navigation in the vehicle information display.
1. Use the
tion”.
buttons to select “Naviga-
2. Press the ENTER button to turn ON/OFF
the alert.
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allows the customer to
change settings for interior lights, intelligent key
settings, unlock settings and other vehicle settings.
The vehicle settings can be changed using
the
, and the ENTER buttons.
Auto Room Lamp
The interior lights can be set to be ON or OFF if
any door is unlocked. From the Vehicle Settings
menu, select “Auto Room Light”. Use the ENTER
button to turn this feature ON or OFF.
Light Sensitivity (if so equipped)
The light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier
based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Light
Sensitivity”. Use the ENTER button to change the
sensitivity.
Light Off Delay (if so equipped)
The duration of the automatic headlights can be
changed from 0 to 180 seconds. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Light Off Delay”. Use
the ENTER button to change the duration.
Wiper with Speed
The wiper with speed can be set to be ON or
OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select
“Wiper with Speed”. Use the ENTER button to
turn this feature ON or OFF.
I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)
When this item is turned on, the request switch
on the door is activated. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “I-Key Door Unlock”. Use the
ENTER button to activate this function.
Selective-Unlock
When this item is turned on, only the driver’s door
is unlocked first after the door unlock operation.
When the door handle request switch on the
driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed
to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is
unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the
door unlock operation is performed again within
1 minute. When this item is turned to off, all the
doors will be unlocked after the door unlock
operation is performed once. From the Vehicle
Settings menu, select “Selective Unlock”. Use
the ENTER button to activate this function.
Auto Door Unlock
The auto door unlock function automatically unlocks all the doors when the shift selector is
placed in P (park) position. From the Vehicle
Settings menu, select “Auto Door Unlock”. Use
the ENTER button to enable/disable this function.
Answer back horn
When the answer back horn is on the horn will
chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once
when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Remote Start (if so equipped)
The remote start function can be turned on or off.
If the setting is OFF the vehicle cannot be started
using the intelligent key. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Remote Start”. Use the ENTER button to enable/disable.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 91 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Battery Saver
Units
Tire Pressures (if so equipped)
Activating the battery saver will automatically turn
off the headlights after a period of time when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
when the headlight switch is in the
or
position. From the Vehicle Settings
menu, select “Battery Saver”. Use the ENTER
button to enable/disable this function.
The units that are shown in the vehicle information display can be changed:
The unit for tire pressure that displays in the
vehicle information display can be changed to:
● Mileage
● psi
● Tire pressures
● kPa
● Temperature
● bar
● Kgf/cm2
● French
Use the
, and the ENTER buttons to
select and change the units of the vehicle information display. The units of the navigation screen
can be changed independently of the vehicle
information display. For vehicles equipped with
Navigation, see “System” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
section of this manual.
● Spanish
Mileage
● °F (Fahrenheit)
The unit for the mileage that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed to:
● °C (Celsius)
Language
The language of the vehicle information display
can be changed to:
● US English
, and the ENTER buttons to
Use the
select and change the language of the vehicle
information display. The language of the center
display/navigation can be changed independently of the vehicle information display. For vehicles not equipped with Navigation see “SETTING button:” and vehicles equipped with
Navigation see, “System” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
section of this manual.
● miles, MPG, Inch
Use the
and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.
Temperature
The temperature that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed from:
Use the ENTER button to toggle choices.
Welcome Effects
● km/h, l/100km, cm
Use the
and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.
The welcome screen display can be turned
ON/OFF to display when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position. To
enable/disable the welcome screen:
1. Press the
button.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 92 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
2. Use the
buttons to select “Settings”,
and press ENTER.
3. Select “Welcome Effects” using the
buttons and press ENTER to turn this function ON or OFF.
Factory Reset
The settings in the vehicle information display can
be reset back to the factory default. To reset the
vehicle information display:
1. Press the
button.
2. Use the
buttons to select “Settings”,
and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Factory Reset” using the
tons and press the ENTER button.
but-
4. Select “YES” to return all settings back to
default by pressing the ENTER button.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 93 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LIC2343
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
4. Push ignition to OFF
5. Key Battery Low
8. Low Fuel
9. Low Washer Fluid
2. Key ID Incorrect
6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system
3. Shift to Park
7. Release parking brake
10. Door Open
11. Trunk Open
Instruments and controls 2-23
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 94 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
12. Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?
Shift to Park
13. Low Outside Temperature
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift
selector is in any position other than P (Park)
position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
14. Power will turn off to save the battery
15. CVT Error
16. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
17. Low Oil Pressure
18. Key Registration Complete
If this warning illuminates, move the shift selector
to the P (Park) position or start the engine.
20. TPMS Error
For additional information about Intelligent Key,
see “NISSAN Intelligent KeyT” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
21. Remote Start (if so equipped)
Push ignition to OFF
22. Loose Fuel Cap
After the Push ignition to OFF warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC position when the
shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position.
19. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air (if so equipped)
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the intelligent key is
left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch is
the ON or ACC position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition
switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK
position.
Key ID Incorrect
Key Battery Low
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
placed from the OFF position and the intelligent
key is not recognized by the system. You can not
start the engine with an unregistered key.
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.
See “NISSAN Intelligent KeyT” in “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” for more information.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. See “Battery replacement” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system
This indicator appears when the battery of the
Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key
system and the vehicle are not communicating
normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the
Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.
For more information see, “Intelligent Key battery
discharge” in the “Starting and driving” section.
Release Parking brake
This warning illuminates in the message area of
the vehicle information display when the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Washer Fluid
This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. See “Windshieldwasher fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 95 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Door Open
Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
This warning illuminates when a door has been
opened when the engine is running.
This warning appears when the headlights are
left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.
Place the headlight switch to OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” in this section.
Trunk Open
This warning illuminates when the trunk has been
opened when the engine is running.
Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?
This indicator appears when the set time is
reached. The time can be set up to 6 hours. For
setting the timer see, “Timer alert” in this section.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature
is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be
changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit, see
“Temperature” earlier in this section.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This warning appears in message area of the
vehicle information display after a period of time if
the shift selector has not moved from the P (Park)
position.
CVT Error
This warning illuminates when the there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes
on, have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Low Oil Pressure
lier in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”
section.
TPMS Error
This warning appears when there is a error with
your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
This warning appears in message area of the
vehicle information display if low oil pressure is
detected. This gauge is not designed to indicated
low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is
not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use
the dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil”
in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Push to start (if so equipped)
Intelligent key registration complete
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
This appears when a new intelligent key is registered to the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning (if so
equipped)
This warning appears in the vehicle information
display when the vehicle has been started using
the remote start function. To start the vehicle,
apply the brake and place the ignition switch in
the ON position.
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of
all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See “Low tire pressure warning light” ear-
Instruments and controls 2-25
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 96 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SECURITY SYSTEMS
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
LIC0301
Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
● Vehicle security system
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the
doors, trunk lid or the hood when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type
system that activates when a vehicle is moved or
when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with the
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch
(if so equipped), power door lock switch or
mechanical key.
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
onds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The
security light begins to flash once every 3
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the system will not arm.
● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
trunk lid locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door
or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing
button on the Intelligent Key.
the
2-26 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 97 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The alarm is activated by:
● opening the door or trunk lid without using
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing
button on the Intelligent Key, or pressthe
ing the request switch (if so equipped) on the
driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent
Key in range of the door handle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 98 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the window with the defroster before you wash the window.
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by
snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect
its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to
the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately
1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the
wiper.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
with washer fluid concentrates at full
strength. Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while
filling the window washer reservoir.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir. Do
not use the window washer reservoir to
mix the washer fluid concentrate and
water.
WIC1434
SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
B (Faster). Also, the interA (Slower) or s
mittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
2-28 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 99 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation
4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up s
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you s
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
LIC2324
Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
LIC2325
Type B
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio system.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 100 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
title will be moved
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so
equipped)
WARNING
cHIGH
VOLTAGE
● When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer.
● Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
● The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced.
● If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
WIC1435
Type A
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the
color and brightness will soon stabilize.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 101 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
WIC1436
WIC1510
Type B
Type C
Lighting
When turning the switch to the
position, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
posiWhen turning the switch to the
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 102 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. See “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 .
tion s
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
LIC2351
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn
on and off automatically. The autolight system
can:
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for a period of time. If another door is
opened while the headlights are on, then the
timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
, or
position.
the OFF,
LIC2318
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located in the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If
this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 103 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
WIC1438
Headlight beam select
To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
light illuminates.
and the
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
Battery saver system
The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
position. Turn the
OFF position or in the
headlight switch to the
position for full
illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after
a period of time.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 104 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LIC2305
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
A to increase the brightPush the “+” button s
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at
night.
B to decrease the brightPush the “-” button s
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at
night.
WIC1439
WIC1440
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
Turn signal
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
position, then turn the fog light
to the
switch to the
position.
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
Lane change signal
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in
the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then
position.
turn the fog light switch to the
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 105 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
HORN
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
LIC2319
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of the
steering wheel.
WARNING
WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 106 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
title will be moved
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the low or high position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
LIC1543
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
● If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 107 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so
equipped)
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
NOTE:
The heated steering wheel switch is
equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the
switch has been activate for 30 minutes,
the system will automatically turn off. If the
surface temperature of the steering wheel
is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is
turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.
LIC0421
LIC2315
The heated steering wheel system is designed to
operate only when the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is below approximately 68°F
(20°C).
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the
steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),
then turn off automatically.
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 108 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
POWER OUTLET
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
LIC2306
Instrument panel
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlets are powered only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Open the lower half of the console box to access
the power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in this
section.
LIC2307
Console box
CAUTION
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 109 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
STORAGE
LIC2308
MAP POCKETS
LIC0016
LIC2312
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s (if so equipped) and passenger’s
seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 110 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC2298
Front
CUP HOLDERS
LIC2297
Rear
The rear center cup holders are located in the
rear fold-down armrest.
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 111 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LIC2296
Soft bottle holder
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
LIC2300
WIC1120
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the
2 the
1 or unlocking s
master key when locking s
glove box.
Upper half
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box.
The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the front of the upper half of the
console box for phone cord routing to the power
outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-41
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 112 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
WIC1121
LIC2362
Lower half
GROCERY HOOKS
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is
located inside the console box.
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of time, the
power to the windows is canceled.
2-42 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 113 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.
LIC2299
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger side (automatic operation if so equipped)
Right rear passenger side
Left rear passenger side
Driver side automatic switch
WIC1129
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
1 . To close the
window position is reached s
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold it up until the desired window
2 .
position is reached s
Instruments and controls 2-43
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 114 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Auto-reverse function
If the control unit detects something caught in the
window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position or for a period of time after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.
LIC2311
LIC0410
Rear power window switch
Automatic operation
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
1 . To
window, push the switch and hold it down s
2 .
close the window, pull the switch up s
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down (only
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and
release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
When the automatic operation for the
power window switch does not
operate
If the automatic operation does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize
the power window switch.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 115 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the driver’s window switch
down until the window opens completely.
automatically open or close all the way. To stop
the roof, push the switch once more while it is
opening or closing.
3. Release the switch.
Tilting the moonroof
4. Pull and hold the driver’s window switch up
to the second detent until the window glass
has reached the full close position. Continue to hold the window switch in the
up position for 5 seconds after the window glass has reached the full close
position. (It is necessary for this entire step
to be completed with one continuous pull of
the window switch.)
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the
1 and release it; it
switch to the tilt up position s
need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push
2 .
the switch to the tilt down position s
5. Release the switch.
Initialization is now complete. The automatic operation for the power window switch should now
operate.
If the automatic operation does not operate properly after performing the above procedure, see a
NISSAN dealer for assistance.
No initialization is required for all the other window switches.
Resetting the moonroof switch
LIC2313
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The automatic moonroof is operational for a period of time,
even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door is opened during this period of
time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to
1 to tilt the moonroof up.
the close position s
2. Push and hold the switch to the close posi1 .
tion s
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
Sliding the moonroof
4. Push and hold the switch to the open posi2 to fully tilt the moonroof down.
tion s
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the
1 position and
2 or close s
switch to the open s
release it; it need not be held. The roof will
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.
Instruments and controls 2-45
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 116 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by an NISSAN dealer.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When tilting down:
Sunshade
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
CAUTION
When closing:
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
2-46 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 117 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
INTERIOR LIGHT
LIC2302
The interior light can be turned ON regardless of door position. The light will go off after
a period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position when any door is
opened.
The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off the
interior lights when a door open, push the
switch, the interior lights will not illuminate,
regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s
door is closed and locked. The lights will also
go off after a period of time when the doors
are open.
LIC2303
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
NOTE:
The step lights illuminate when the driver
and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position.
These lights will turn off automatically after
a period of time while doors are open to
prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
Instruments and controls 2-47
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 118 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
title will be moved
PERSONAL LIGHTS
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the rear personal lights on, press the
switch. To turn them off, press the switch again.
LIC1083
LIC2304
Rear personal lights
Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn
them off, press the button again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
2-48 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 119 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
TRUNK LIGHT
HOMELINKT UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
The light will go off after a period of time if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLinkT will retain all programming.
When the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLinkT” later in this section.
WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLinkT
Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe
exhaust gases; they contain colorless
and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon
monoxide is dangerous. It can cause
unconsciousness or death.
Instruments and controls 2-49
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 120 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer to
the HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
It is also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device being programmed to
HomeLinkT for quicker programming and
accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLinkT surface, keeping the HomeLinkT
1 in view.
indicator light s
LIC2365
LIC2366
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold the desired HomeLinkT button and
handheld transmitter button. DO NOT re1
lease until the HomeLinkT indicator light s
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)
3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLinkT
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
the “Programing HomeLinkT for Canadian
customers and gate openers” section.
is
● If
the
indicator
light
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the HomeLinkT button is
pressed and released.
1 blinks rapidly for
● If the indicator light s
two seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.
A second person may make the following
steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.
Do not stand on your vehicle to perform
the next steps.
2-50 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 121 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4. At the receiver located on the garage door
opener motor in the garage, locate the
“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer but it
is usually located near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there
is difficulty locating the button, reference the
garage door opener’s manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and
hold the trained HomeLinkT button for two
seconds and release. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence up to 3
times to complete the training process.
HomeLinkT should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLinkT buttons,
refer to the HomeLinkT web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND
GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long
enough for HomeLinkT to pick up the signal
during training. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
training a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Training” procedures, replace
“Programming HomeLinkT” Step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”
process to prevent possible damage to the
garage door opener components.
1. See “Programing HomeLinkT” step 1 earlier
in this section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold the desired HomeLinkT button and the
hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to
press and hold the desired HomeLinkT button while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been
learned. The HomeLinkT indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training. DO NOT
release until the HomeLinkT indicator light
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed with “Programming HomeLinkT”
step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it
back in when programming is completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINKT
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver, after it is
programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and
release the appropriate programmed HomeLinkT
Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being
transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.
Instruments and controls 2-51
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 122 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
If the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information:
The following procedure clears the programmed
information from both buttons. Individual buttons
cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons
can be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming a
single HomeLinkT button” in this section.
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
● position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLinkT surface.
● press and hold both the HomeLinkT and
hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLinkT is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer to
the HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkT
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not
hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLinkT is now in the programming mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with
“Programming HomeLinkT” - Step 1.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINKT BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following:
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20
seconds. Without releasing the HomeLinkT
button, proceed with “Programming
HomeLinkT” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLinkT
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkT button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkT
buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT button. DO NOT release the button.
2-52 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 123 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. Note: Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Instruments and controls 2-53
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 124 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
MEMO
2-54 Instruments and controls
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 125 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent KeyT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NISSAN Intelligent KeyT With Door and Trunk
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent KeyT operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
NISSAN Intelligent KeyT Without Door and Trunk
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Remote engine start operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Canceling a remote start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Conditions the remote start will not work . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 126 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
KEYS
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
WPD0427
Type A
1.
2.
3.
Intelligent Key (2 sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (1 plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEYT
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many
as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used
with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by an NISSAN dealer prior to use with the
Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-
LPD2052
Type B
istration process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when registering
new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that
you have to the NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences
which will damage the Intelligent Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
This may prevent the unauthorized use of
the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact an NISSAN dealer.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 127 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
Valet hand-off
SPA1951
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors, glove box and rear seatback lock.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below:
Additional or replacement keys:
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF
position.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with
the mechanical key.
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can duplicate your existing key. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key
codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This could affect
system function.
See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
See “Doors” in this section, “Storage” in the
“Instruments and controls” section, and “Seats”
in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 128 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
DOORS
Opening and closing windows (if so
equipped)
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time.
WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
LPD0461
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
Driver’s side
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle
Turning the key toward the front s
locks all doors.
2 of the
Turning the key one time toward the rear s
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
3 (where the key can
returning the key to neutral s
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
4 .
all doors s
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 129 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved to the
lock position and any door is open, all doors will
lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent
Key left in the vehicle and any door is open, all
doors will unlock automatically and a chime will
sound after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
LPD2092
Inside lock
LPD2093
Door lock switch
● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 , then close the
lock knob to the lock position s
door.
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
1 . When locking the door this
the lock position s
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2 .
side) to the unlock position s
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position s
● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
1. Close all doors.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
position (UNLOCK) for more than
the
5 seconds.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 130 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEYT WITH
DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST
SWITCHES
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the
power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be
changed using the Vehicle Settings in the
vehicle information display. The “Auto
Door Unlock” choices are:
● Off
● IGN OFF
● Shift into P
SPA2037
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
2 , the
When the lever is in the unlock position s
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
1 ,
When the lever is in the LOCK position s
the door can be opened only from the outside.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function or pushing
the request switch on the vehicle without taking
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating
environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 131 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.
● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indicator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Display. See “Vehicle Information Display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 132 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch s
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2073
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch s
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 133 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
WPD0375
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
● Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
LPD2074
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEYT
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of operation.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 134 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handle or the trunk opener
switch.
LPD2075
Locking doors
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch s
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.
WPD0369
NOTE:
● Request switches for all doors and trunk can
be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock
setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information display.
See “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section.
● When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
● Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 135 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
LPD2075
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
1 .
2. Push the door handle request switch s
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch s
again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 136 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Locking the doors with the remote controller.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
WPD0369
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch:
● Opening any door.
● Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
LPD2077
Opening the trunk lid
A for
1. Push the trunk opener request switch s
more than 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 137 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
WPD0359
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
● When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
2. Close all doors.
● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
3. Press the
Key.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
button on the Intelligent
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 138 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
button:
minute after pressing the
● Opening any doors.
● Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of time
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by
performing one of the following operations:
WPD0360
Unlocking doors
button on the Intelligent
1. Press the
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
button again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.
NOTE:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
Opening windows
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously
open windows equipped with automatic operation.
● To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
the
button on the Intelligent Key.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle
information display. See “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
The unlocking operation can be changed in
Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 139 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WPD0364
WPD0361
WPD0362
Releasing the trunk lid
Using the panic alarm
Answer back horn feature
button for longer than 0.5 secPress the
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
If desired, the answer back horn feature can be
deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When debutton is
activated and the LOCK
pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and
when the UNLOCK
button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a
period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
● The request switch on the driver or passenger door has been pushed and the Intelligent
Key is in range of the door handle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 140 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
This text will be moved above
chart on next page
NOTE:
WARNING SIGNALS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,
the vehicle information display screen will
show the current mode after the ignition
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the
ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode. See “Answer back
horn” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 141 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE text will be placed here
Symptom
The Shift to Park warning appears in the
When stopping the engine
display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
The Door Open warning appears in the disWhen opening the driver’s door to get out
play and the inside warning chime sounds
of the vehicle
continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears in
the display, the outside chime sounds 3
times and the inside warning chime sounds
When closing the door after getting out of
for approximately 3 seconds.
the vehicle
The Shift to Park warning appears in the
display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
knob turned to LOCK
When pushing the door handle request
The outside chime sounds for approximately
switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli2 seconds.
gent Key to lock the door
Possible Cause
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
“Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.)
The Key low battery indicator appears in the
The battery charge is low.
display.
When pushing the ignition switch to start
the engine
When pushing the ignition switch
The KEY ID Incorrect warning appears i n
the display, the outside chime sounds 3
times and the inside warning chime sounds
for approximately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in
the meter illuminates in yellow.
Remedy
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent
Key system.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 142 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEYT
WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK
REQUEST SWITCHES
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indicator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Display. See “Vehicle Information Display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 143 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
● When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of the
vehicle.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 144 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
WPD0359
WPD0360
Unlocking doors
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
1. Press the
Key.
2. Close all doors.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
button on the Intelligent
button again within 5 sec3. Press the
onds to unlock all doors.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 145 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in
Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pressing the
button:
● Opening any doors.
● Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of time
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by
performing one of the following operations:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle
information display. See “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
Opening windows
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously
open windows equipped with automatic operation.
but● To open the windows, press the
ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
button on the Intelligent Key.
the
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
WPD0364
Releasing the trunk lid
button for longer than 0.5 secPress the
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 146 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
NOTE:
If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,
the vehicle information display screen will
show the current mode after the ignition
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the
ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode. See “Answer back
horn” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
WPD0361
WPD0362
Using the panic alarm
Answer back horn feature
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
If desired, the answer back horn feature can be
deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When debutton is
activated and the LOCK
pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and
when the UNLOCK
button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a
period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 147 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 148 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
The Shift to Park warning appears in the
When stopping the engine
display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
The Door Open warning appears in the disWhen opening the driver’s door to get out
play and the inside warning chime sounds
of the vehicle
continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears in
the display, the outside chime sounds 3
times and the inside warning chime sounds
When closing the door after getting out of
for approximately 3 seconds.
the vehicle
The Shift to Park warning appears in the
display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately
knob turned to LOCK
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
When pushing the LOCK button on the
2 seconds.
Intelligent Key to lock the door
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
Possible Cause
Remedy
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Key low battery indicator appears in the The battery charge is low.
display.
When pushing the ignition switch to start
the engine
When pushing the ignition switch
The KEY ID Incorrect warning appears in
the display, the outside chime sounds 3
times and the inside warning chime sounds
for approximately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in
the meter illuminates in yellow.
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
“Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.)
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent
Key system.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 149 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Laws in some local communities may restrict the
use of remote starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote start to have the
vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the
Remote Engine Start feature. See “Conditions
the remote start will not work” in this section for
additional information.
Other conditions can affect the performance of
the Intelligent Key transmitter. See “NISSAN Intelligent KeyT System” in this section for additional information.
LPD2078
The
button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent KeyT if the vehicle has remote engine start.
This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected when the
remote start feature is used:
● Vehicles with manual or automatic climate
control systems will default to the last used
heating or cooling mode.
● Vehicle equipped with heated seats may
have this feature come on during a remote
start. See “Heated seats” in the “Instruments
and controls” section for more information.
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
The remote engine start function can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.
The remote engine start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the remote start feature to start the engine
perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.
LOCK button to lock all
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the
remote start button until the turn signal lights
illuminate. If the vehicle is not within view
press and hold the
remote start button for about 2 seconds.
The following events will occur when the engine
starts:
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on
as long as the engine is running.
● The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
● The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for
an additional 10 minutes. See “Extending
engine run time” in this section.
Depress the brake and place the ignition switch
in the ON position before driving. For further
instructions see “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 150 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
● Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
The remote start feature can be extended one
time by performing the steps listed in “Remote
starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will
be calculated as follows:
● Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START
WILL NOT WORK
● The first 10 minute run time will start when
the remote start function is performed.
The remote start will not operate if any of the
following conditions are present:
● The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the remote start function is performed. For example, if the engine has been
running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are
added, the engine will run for a total of 15
minutes.
● The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start
with an extension, are allowed between ignition
cycles.
The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON
position and then back to the OFF position before the remote start procedure can be used
again.
CANCELING A REMOTE START
To cancel a remote start, perform one of the
following:
● Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and
until the parking lights
press and hold
turn off.
● The Remote Start function has been
switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
The remote engine start may display a warning or
indicator in the vehicle information display. For an
explanation of the warning or indicator please see
“Vehicle information display warning and indicators” in the “Instruments and controls” section.
● The hood is not securely closed.
● The hazard warning lights are on.
● The I–Key Indicator Light
remains
solid in the vehicle information display.
● The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the
vehicle.
● The ignition switch is pushed without an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
● The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is
not depressed.
● Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote
start with an extension, have already been
used.
● The vehicle is not in P (Park).
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 151 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HOOD
TRUNK LID
LPD2080
LPD2079
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the
hood springs up slightly.
Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
Remove the support rod from the clamp.
Insert the support rod into the slot on the
passenger side fender ledge.
5. When closing the hood, return the support
rod to its original position, lower the hood to
approximately 30 cm (12 in) above the latch
and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
Instrument panel
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. The
vehicle should only ever be operated
with the hood securely closed.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 152 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid perform one of the following
after unlocking the vehicle:
● Press the button on the instrument panel.
● Press the button on the Intelligent Key.
WPD0364
Intelligent Key
LPD2077
Request switch
OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
A release switch (if so equipped).
● Push the s
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
NOTE:
Request switches for all doors and trunk
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door
Lock setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information
display. See “Vehicle information display”
in the “Instruments and controls” section.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 153 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.
LPD0395
Cancel switch
When the switch, located inside the glove box, is
in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will
be cancelled.
The trunk lid cannot be opened when:
● using the trunk lid release switch,
● the trunk open request switch (if so
equipped) is pushed, when the Intelligent
Key is in range of the vehicle or
● the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is
pressed.
LPD2081
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 154 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
LPD2022
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below the
instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull
the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door
securely.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving trips
for the message to be displayed. Failure
to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning apMalfunction
pears may cause the
Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 155 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
light illuminates because
If the
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
light
to drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving trips.
If the
light does not turn off after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
LPD2082
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
LPD2090
Loose Fuel Cap warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the
vehicle information display when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for
the message to be displayed. To turn off the
warning, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
as possible. See “Fuel-filler cap”.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
A on the steer3. Press the
next button s
ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off the
B after tightLOOSE FUEL CAP warning s
ening the fuel-filler cap.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 156 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
See attachment A
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
SUN VISORS
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
1 all the way toward you and
Pull the lever s
adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in
3 , to the desired position. Lock the
direction s
wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the
lever has returned to its original position.
WARNING
LPD2085
TILT OPERATION
1 and adjust the steerPull the lock lever down s
2 to the desired position.
ing wheel up or down s
1 firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever up s
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
WPD0344
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 18:46:10 2012 SUM: 23EB9F81
/nissan_pdm/nissancims/owners/com/manual-tele.alt
Attachment A
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
1 and adjust the steerPull the lock lever down s
3 to the desired
ing wheel forward or backward s
position.
1 firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever up s
steering wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
0-1
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 157 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
MIRRORS
To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
To extend (if so equipped) the sun visor, slide
in or out as needed.
CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
LPD2067
WPD0126
VANITY MIRRORS
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
1 reduces glare from the
The night position s
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2 when driving in daylight
Use the day position s
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 158 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
LPD0469
Type A - Without compass
LPD0470
Type A and Type B
Type B - With compass
The indicator light will turn off.
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light s
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
● the | button for inside mirrors without
compass.
● the O button for inside mirrors without
compass.
button for inside mirrors with
● the
compass.
button for inside mirrors with
● the
compass.
The indicator light will turn on.
For information on HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 159 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
The outside mirror remote control only operates
when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
1 to select the right or left
Move the small switch s
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
2 .
using the large switch s
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
LPD2083
WARNING
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 160 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LPD2084
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 161 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
How to park with predicted course lines
(Navigation System only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
USB interface (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
iPodT* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
iPodT* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 162 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
BluetoothT streaming audio without
Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 4-62
BluetoothT streaming audio without
Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped). . . . . . 4-62
BluetoothT streaming audio with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
PandoraT audio (United States only)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 4-85
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
BluetoothT settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 163 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System voice
commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 164 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
LHA2239
1. PWR button/VOL (volume) control knob
5. MAP button*
2. Display screen
6. NAV button*
3. ENTER / AUDIO button / TUNE / SCROLL
knob
7. MENU button
4.
8.
(brightness control) button
BACK button
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 165 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
9.
button**
10. CAMERA button
* For information regarding the Navigation system
control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.
** For information regarding the BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System control button, see
“BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System” in this
section.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
CAUTION
● The glass display screen may break if it
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.
WARNING
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 166 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LHA2246
LHA1478
Touch screen operation
LHA2245
Adjusting the item:
Selecting the item:
For screens where an item can be adjusted incrementally, such as when adjusting the bass and
treble for the audio system, touch the “+” key s
2 to adjust the settings of an item.
or the “2” key s
Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a set
number of conditions. For example, the Display
Mode can be set to “Automatic”, “Day” or “Night”.
1 . The
To adjust this type of item, touch the item s
item will cycle through the available settings and
the red indicator lights to the left of the setting
2 will come on or turn off accordingly.
condition s
Touch an item to select. For example, to select
1 on the
the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key s
screen.
When there are more items than can be dis3 to
played on one screen, touch the up arrow s
4 to
scroll up the page or touch the down arrow s
scroll down the page.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 167 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● OK:
Completes the character input.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
LHA2247
Press the
BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
LHA2253
Inputting characters:
HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON
1 .
Touch the letter key s
For more information about the “POIs Powered
by Google™”, “Google™ Send-To-Car, “Traffic
Information” and “Weather” features, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
There are some options available when inputting
characters.
● 123 / ABC:
Changes the available character set to numbers.
● Space:
Inserts a space.
● Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
For more information about the “Voice Commands” key, see “Nissan Voice Recognition System” in this section.
To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the “Settings” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 168 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
For information regarding BluetoothT audio, see
“BluetoothT streaming audio with Navigation
System” in this section.
LHA2248
LHA2249
System
3. Select the desired item.
Audio
Select the “System” key to select and/or adjust
various functions of the system. A screen with
additional options will appear.
For audio setup, refer to “Audio system” in this
section.
Navigation
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Phone & Bluetooth
For information regarding the BluetoothT HandsFree Phone System, see “BluetoothT HandsFree Phone System” in this section.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 169 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Display Mode
The display can be adjusted to fit the level of
lighting in the vehicle. Touch the “Display Mode”
key to cycle through the options. “Day” and
“Night” modes are suited for the respective times
of day, while “Automatic” controls the display
automatically.
Scroll Direction
The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted.
Choose either “up” or “down”.
LHA1482
LHA2250
Display:
Clock Settings:
Select the “Display” key to adjust the appearance
of the display. The following settings can be
adjusted:
Select the “Clock Settings” key to adjust the time
and the appearance of the clock on the display.
The following settings can be adjusted:
Brightness
The brightness of the display can be set to Very
Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touch
the “Brightness” key to cycle through the options.
Time Format
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Date Format
Select from five possible formats of displaying
the day, month and year.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 170 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Clock Mode
Select the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the
system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time.
“Manual” allows you to set the clock using the
“Set Clock Manually” key. “Time Zone” maintains
the time based upon the zone selected when
selecting the “Time Zone” key.
LHA2251
LHA2252
Set Clock Manually
When this setting is activated, the clock can be
set manually. Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust
the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or
down. “Clock Mode” must be set to “Manual” for
this option to be available.
Language:
Daylight Savings Time
When this setting is activated, daylight savings
time is on. Touch the “Daylight Savings Time” key
to toggle the setting on or off.
Select the “Touchscreen Click” key to toggle the
touchscreen click feature on or off. When activated, a click sound will be heard every time a key
on the screen is touched.
Time Zone
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
System Beeps:
Select the “Language” key to adjust the language
used by the system. The language can be set to
English, Français or Español.
Touchscreen click:
Select the “System Beeps” key to toggle the
system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 171 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
message appears on the screen or a button on
the unit (such as the
button) is pressed
and held for two seconds.
Reset all settings/memory:
Select the “Reset All Settings/Memory” key to
return all settings to default and to clear the
memory.
Info
For information about the “Info” key, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
XM
For XM setup, refer to “Audio system” in this
section.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
button. Pressing the button again will
the
change the display to the day or the night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the
button for more than
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a
rearward view from the vehicle.
WARNING
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
● When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.
● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
● Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed beside the license plate light.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 172 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines s
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
6 (Navigation SysPredicted course lines s
tem only):
Indicate the predicted course when backing up.
The predicted course lines will be displayed on
the monitor when the shift selector is in the R
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is
turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is
turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position.
LHA1196
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the
predicted course lines are wider than the actual
width and course.
LHA2278
The predicted course lines feature can be set to
on or off.
1. Press the CAMERA button.
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A are displayed on the monitor.
vehicle body line s
2. Select the “Show Guidelines” key to toggle
the feature on or off.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
● Red line s
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
● Yellow line s
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
● Green line s
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
● Green line s
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 173 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES (Navigation System
only)
WARNING
● Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up. Always back
up slowly.
● Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
position, road conditions and road
grade.
● If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
● If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the
following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
● When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level
paved surface. The distance viewed on
the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
● When backing up the vehicle up a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When backing up
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
in the monitor are closer than they appear. Use the inside mirror or glance
over your shoulder to properly judge
distances to other objects.
The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
LHA1197
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
A when the shift selector is
the screen s
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 174 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
D parallel to the
vehicle width guide lines s
C while referring to the preparking space s
dicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA1198
WHA1504
3. Slowly back up the vehicle, adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted course
C.
B enter the parking space s
lines s
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 175 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Backing up on a steep uphill
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place s
B . Note that any object on
the hill is the place s
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place s
B . Note that any object on
the hill is the place s
the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
WHA1505
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 176 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Backing up behind a projecting object
C is shown farther than the position
The position s
C is
B in the display. However, the position s
A.
actually at the same distance as the position s
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
A if the object projects over the
the position s
actual backing up course.
LHA1201
WHA1506
Backing up near a projecting object
A do not touch the
The predicted course lines s
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit
the object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 177 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4. Adjust the level using the TUNE-SCROLL
knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to apply the adjustment.
● Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
LHA2254
Without Navigation System
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the quality of the
screen differs depending on the type of screen
present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without Navigation System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE-SCROLL knob to highlight
the “Brightness” or “Contrast” key.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
LHA1482
With Navigation System
For vehicles with Navigation System:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the “Settings” key.
3. Select the “System” key.
4. Select the “Display” key.
5. Touch the “Brightness key and adjust the
level to the desired setting.
● Do not adjust the display of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 178 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
VENTS
OPERATING TIPS
● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Reverse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
● It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the RearView Monitor screen is displayed completely. When the shift selector is returned to
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take
some time until the screen changes. Objects
on the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction.
● When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
● When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the SETTING button or MENU button may not change the brightness.
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display objects. Clean the camera.
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
● Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
● Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.
LHA2255
Side
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the
to open the vents or
toward the
to close them.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 179 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
LHA2256
Center
LHA1134
Rear
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 180 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX
A/C
LHA2243
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fan speed control / system OFF dial /
air conditioning (A/C) button
Air flow control buttons
Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button
Air recirculation button
5.
6.
Rear window defroster button
Front windshield defrost button
— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 181 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
button to the ON position when:
Press the
● driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.
● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For more information about the rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,
see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
The air recirculation function does not operate
Heating
Defrosting or defogging
when in the
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
button to the OFF position
1. Press the
for normal heating.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
or
air flow modes.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and press the
button to
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
button again.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
1. Press the defrost/defog button
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 182 SESS: 5 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (the indicator light on the
button will come on)
if the outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps
mode audefog the windshield. The
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging performance.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Press the
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Cooling
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
The indicator light on the A/C button will
come on. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
● For quick cooling when the outside tembutton to
perature is high, push the
the ON position. Be sure to return the
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX
A/C may be used for quick cooling.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Dehumidified heating
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
button to
desired position, and push in the
activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
air flow control button.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/27/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 183 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
or
are selected, the
● When the
air conditioner automatically turns on (the
indicator light may or may not illuminate) if
the outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps
defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging performance.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
Operating tips
● Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.
● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
● The air conditioner is always on in
mode, regardless of whether the indicator
light is on or off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 184 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LHA2284
LHA2285
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 185 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LHA2286
LHA2287
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 186 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LHA2288
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 187 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
7. A/C (air conditioner) button
8. MODE (manual air flow control) button
9.
(fan speed control) buttons
10. ON-OFF button
11.
(rear window defroster) button
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
LHA2244
1.
2.
3.
(front defroster) button
Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/
AUTO (automatic) climate control button
Display screen
4.
5.
6.
Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)/DUAL (passenger’s side temperature control) button
Fresh air intake button
Air recirculation button
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 188 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be
displayed.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired temperature.
● Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each
temperature control dial. When the DUAL
button or passenger’s side temperature dial
is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.
To turn off the passenger’s side temperature
control, press the DUAL button.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be
displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature or the system may
not work properly.
● Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.
● As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the automatic mode.
● When the
front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C) (The indicator light may or
may not illuminate). The air recirculate mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the fan control buttons
control the fan speed.
to manually
1. Press the
front defroster button on.
(The indicator light on the button will come
on.)
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
Push the
air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the button will come on.
Air recirculation
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 189 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The air recirculation cannot be activated when
the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting
mode or the
front defrosting and foot outlet mode.
Fresh air intake
fresh air intake button to draw
Press the
outside air into the passenger compartment.
The
indicator light on the button will come
on.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the inair recirculation button.
take air, press the
To return to the automatic control mode, press
and hold the
air recirculation button or
press and hold the
fresh air intake button
for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air
recirculation and fresh air intake buttons) will
flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.
Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows from center and side vents
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.
To turn system off
Press the OFF button.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For more information about the rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,
see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
OPERATING TIPS
LHA1136
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s
side of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 190 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
RADIO
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON position, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 191 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 192 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work properly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
CHECK DISC:
● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
UNPLAYABLE:
● CDs that are not round
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 193 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (if
so equipped)
Terms:
● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
* WindowsT and Windows MediaT are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
WHA1078
Playback order chart
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 194 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 195 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Specification chart:
Supported media
Supported file systems
MP3
Supported
versions*1
WMA
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 196 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cannot play
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 197 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if
so equipped)
● The USB device cannot be formatted with
this system. If you want to format the USB
memory, use your personal computer.
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPodT players. There
are some USB devices which may not be supported with this system.
● Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
● Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
● Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and
dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.
● The player sometimes cannot function when
the passenger compartment temperature is
extremely high. Decrease the temperature
before use.
● Do not leave the USB memory in a place
prone to static electricity or where the air
conditioner blows directly. The data in the
USB memory may be damaged.
● Prepare the USB device by yourself because it is not equipped with the vehicle.
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen.
NISSAN recommends using English language characters with USB devices.
● Do not connect the USB device if the connector or cable is wet. Allow the cable
and/or connectors to dry completely before
connecting the USB device.
● Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPodT. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
● If the iPodT automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPodT.
● The iPodT nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPodT.
● The iPodT nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPodT
nano (2nd generation).
● If you are using an iPodT (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to avoid the iPodT resetting itself.
iPodT is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
BluetoothT streaming audio
● Some BluetoothT audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible BluetoothT
audio device and the in-vehicle BluetoothT
module before using the BluetoothT audio.
● Operating procedure of the BluetoothT audio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 198 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● The BluetoothT audio may be stopped under
the following conditions:
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.
● Do not place the BluetoothT audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle BluetoothT module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
● While an audio device is connected through
the BluetoothT wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
● This system supports the BluetoothT Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTHt is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.
LHA2241
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CD eject button
CD insert slot
SCAN button
DISP button
RPT/RDM button
TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
AUX IN jack
AUX button
CD button
AM button
FM button
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 199 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
12. VOL (volume) control knob / power button
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK
button
15.
SEEK button
MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and
Clock):
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Spd. Sen.
Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) → AUX IN Volume
→ Clock → Clock Adjust
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) control knob / power button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the VOL (volume) control
knob / power button. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, place the ignition in the
ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that was
playing immediately before the system was
turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the VOL (volume) control knob / power
button again turns the system off.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob / power
button to the right to increase volume or to the left
to decrease volume.
Press the MENU button to change the mode as
follows:
To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance,
press the MENU button until the desired mode
SEEK or
appears in the display. Press the
button to adjust the setting to the
TRACK
desired level (-5 to +5). Balance adjusts the
sound between the right and left speakers. Fade
adjusts the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle’s driving
speed changes. It can be set as follows:
OFF → LOW → MID → HIGH
DISP (display) button:
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the audio
display as follows:
For CDs:
Running Time → Album Title: → Artist Name: →
Song Title
For MP3 CDs:
Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title: →
Artist Name: → Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be displayed on the screen; press and hold the DISP
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll
through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is
playing to toggle the audio display between station number and RDS.
Clock operation
To turn the clock display on or off, press the
MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears
on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
toggle the setting (ON or OFF).
Clock set
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“Adjust Clock” appears on the display.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 200 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
2. Press the ENTER button.
3. “Change Hour” will appear on the screen.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
hours and then press ENTER.
4. “Change Minute” will appear on the screen.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
minutes and then press ENTER.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is performed.
FM/AM radio operation
AM and FM buttons:
Press the AM button to change the band to AM.
If another audio source is playing when the AM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
Press the FM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 → FM2 → FM1
If another audio source is playing when the FM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
SEEK and TRACK (tuning)
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
buttons:
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
Press the SEEK button
to tune from low to
high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
to tune from high
Press the TRACK button
to low frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
Press and hold either button to seek at a faster
speed.
SCAN (tuning) button:
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 201 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
SEEK and TRACK (Fast
Forward, Rewind)
buttons:
When the SEEK button
or TRACK
button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased
speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the compact disc returns
to normal play speed.
SEEK and TRACK
buttons:
button is pressed while
When the SEEK
the compact disc is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning. Press the SEEK
button several times
to skip several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional track.
The track number appears in the display window.
(When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped, the first track is played.)
button is pressed, the
When the TRACK
track being played returns to the beginning.
Press the TRACK
button several times to
skip back several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed the CD moves back one track.
SCAN (CDs) button:
RPT/RDM button:
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc
is playing to change the play pattern as follows:
CD:
TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → DISC
REPEAT
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds
to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10
seconds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed
during scan mode.
CD EJECT:
MP3/WMA CD:
When the
button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC
RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC REPEAT
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the
disc will be mixed during play.
DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current
folder will be repeated.
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in
the folder will be mixed during play.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 202 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Press the MENU button repeatedly until “AUX IN
Volume” appears on the screen to control the
incoming volume level of the auxiliary input device. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
level between 0 and +3.
Additional features
For more information about the BluetoothT audio
interface available with this system, see
“BluetoothT streaming audio without Navigation
System (Type A)” in this section.
LHA2242
1.
CD eject button
2. XM button*
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
5.
SEEK button
6. SCAN button
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
7.
CAT button
8. BACK button
9. iPod MENU button
10.TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/SETTING
button
11.AUX IN jack
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 203 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
12.Station select (1 - 6) buttons
13.RDM button
14.RPT button
15.VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button
16.DISP button
17.CD•AUX button
18.FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the VOL (volume) knob /
ON-OFF button while the system is off to call up
the mode that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL (volume)
knob / ON-OFF button.
Turn the VOL (volume) knob / ON-OFF button to
adjust the volume.
LHA2257
SETTING button:
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
Press the SETTING button to show the Settings
screen on the display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to navigate the options and then press the
ENTER button to make a selection.
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” in this section.
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade
Increase or decrease the level of bass, treble,
balance or fade. Balance controls the level of
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade
controls the level of sound between the front and
rear speakers.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 204 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Brightness and Contrast
Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the
appearance of the display screen.
Clock Adjust
Press the ENTER button to highlight the hours or
minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob
to adjust the value. Press the ENTER button
again to set the value.
LHA2258
LHA2259
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)
On-Screen Clock
Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the volume of
the audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed
changes. The feature can be turned off or set to a
level of 1 to 5. Level 5 represents the highest
degree of volume adjustment.
Select “ON” or “OFF” to control whether or not
the clock is shown in the upper right corner of the
display screen.
AUX Vol.
Select “ON” or “OFF” to control whether or not
RDS information is displayed on the screen while
the radio is playing.
RDS Display
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the
boost of the incoming auxiliary device volume. A
setting of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost
in volume.
Language Select
Select the desired language for the system. English, Spanish and French are the available languages.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 205 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
iPodT MENU button
This button can only be used for iPodT operations. See “iPodT player operation without Navigation System” later in this section for details
about the function of this button.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
XM band select:
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning):
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEK•CAT button
or
to
tune from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until the preset number is updated on the
display and the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 206 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD·AUX button:
With a CD loaded, press the CD·AUX button until
the CD mode is displayed on the screen.
CD/MP3 display mode:
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, information such as Artist, Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT button:
while a CD or
Press the SEEK/CAT button
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT
several times to skip backward sevbutton
eral tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
several times
Press the SEEK/CAT button
to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on
a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is
played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD
only):
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 207 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
CD•AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
Press the CD•AUX button to play a compatible
device plugged into the AUX IN jack. The
CD•AUX button is also used to switch the audio
system to a source plugged into the USB input
jack in the center console. When a device is
plugged into the AUX IN jack while another device is plugged into the USB input jack, the
CD•AUX button is used to toggle between the
two functions.
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface (models without Navigation
System)” in this section.
EJECT button:
When the
button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
For more information about the BluetoothT audio
interface available with this system, see
“BluetoothT streaming audio without Navigation
System (Type B)” in this section.
For more information about the PandoraT audio
feature available with this system, see “PandoraT
audio” in this section.
button is pressed twice with a
When the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Additional features
For more information about the iPodT player
available with this system, see “iPodT player operation without Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models without Navigation System)” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 208 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
10.
Forward seek button
11.
Backward seek button
12.CD button
13.FM-AM button
14.XM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” in this section.
LHA2240
VOL (volume) / PWR (power) button:
Type B
1. VOL (volume) / PWR (power) button
2.
CD eject button
3. CD insert slot
4. TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/AUDIO
button
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PWR (power) button
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD, AUX, BluetoothT audio USB or iPodT) that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
BACK button
MENU button
AUX IN jack
Display screen
AUX button
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 209 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
To turn the system off, press the PWR (power)
button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
LHA2261
Audio settings:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the “Settings” key.
3. Select the “Audio” key.
Use the touchscreen to adjust the following items
to the desired setting:
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:
Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance
adjusts the sound between the left and right
speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the
front and rear speakers.
LHA2262
Speed Sensitive Vol.:
Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted
as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. Choose a
setting or choose “0” to disable the feature entirely.
AUX Volume Level:
Controls the volume level of incoming sound
when an auxiliary device is connected to the
system. Available options are Low, Medium and
High.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 210 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
LHA2303
XM settings:
To view the XM settings:
XM band select:
2. Select the “Settings” key.
Pressing the XM button will change the band as
follows:
The signal strength, activation status and other
information are displayed on the screen.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the
screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
1. Press the MENU button.
3. Select the “XM” key.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1* (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn
the radio on.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 211 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob:
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.
When in XM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to change the channel.
SEEK tuning:
LHA1492
While the radio is in XM mode, the operation can
be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch
the “Channels” key to display a list of channels.
Touch a channel displayed on the list to change
to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to
display a list of categories. Touch a category
displayed on the list to display options within that
category.
LHA1489
Tuning with the touchscreen:
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
using the touchscreen. To bring up the visual
tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right
corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar
running from low frequencies on the left to high
frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the
location of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To return to
the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”
key.
When in FM or AM mode, press the seek
or
to tune from low to high
buttons
or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
When in XM mode, press the seek buttons
or
to change the category.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 212 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
LHA2263
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the
XM band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or choose
the radio band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the
XM button.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
LHA1488
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,
certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is being used). Depending on
how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the
text is displayed listing the artist, album and song
title.
There are other keys displayed on the screen
when a CD is playing:
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 213 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list
the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for
selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose
a folder.
SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons:
LHA1490
LHA1491
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the CD. When the random mode is
icon will be displayed to the left
active, the
of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” alternates between randomly playing songs within the current folder and songs
from the CD as a whole. The
icon is displayed to the left of the song title or folder name
to denote which pattern is applied. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until
no
icon is displayed.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the CD. When the repeat mode is
icon will be displayed to the left
active, the
of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating the
current song and repeating the current folder.
The
icon is displayed to the left of the song
title or folder name to denote which pattern is
applied. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Reicon is displayed.
peat” key until no
Browse:
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on
the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in
the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is
Press and hold the seek buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK buttons:
Press the seek button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the seek
button
several times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the seek button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
several times to skip
Press the seek button
forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is
skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the
last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 214 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
When the
button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Additional features
For more information about the iPodT player
available with this system, see “iPodT player operation with Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models with Navigation System)” in this section.
LHA1493
AUX button:
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.
For more information about the BluetoothT audio
interface available with this system, see
“BluetoothT streaming audio with Navigation
System” in this section.
For more information about the PandoraT audio
feature available with this system, see “PandoraT
audio” in this section.
EJECT button:
LHA2264
USB INTERFACE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located on the center
console beneath the heater and air conditioner
controls. Insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
button is pressed with a comWhen the
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 215 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Audio file operation
SEEK/CAT buttons:
CD•AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the CD•AUX button to switch
to the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or
another audio source is plugged in through the
AUX IN jack on the radio, the CD•AUX button
toggles between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
Press the SEEK/CAT button
while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
while an auPress the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
RDM button:
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
TUNE/SCROLL knob:
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on the USB device.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 216 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
LHA2264
LHA1496
USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
Play information:
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the
name of a song on the screen to begin playing
that song.
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located on the center
console beneath the heater and air conditioner
controls. Insert the USB device into the jack.
Seeking buttons:
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
Press the
button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to return to the beginning
of the current track. Press the
button several times to skip backward several tracks.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 217 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position.
Press the
button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to advance one track.
Press the
button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on
the USB device is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodT can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPodT from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPodT.
Random and repeat play mode:
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. When the random
icon is displayed to the
mode is active, the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which random pattern is applied. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until
icon is displayed.
no
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. When the repeat
icon is displayed to the
mode is active, the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat
icon
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no
is displayed.
* iPodT is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
LHA2264
iPodT* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPodT
To connect an iPodT to the vehicle so that the
iPodT can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located on the center console below the heater
and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPodTspecific end of the cable to the iPodT and the
USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the
vehicle. If your iPodT supports charging via a
USB connection, its battery will be charged while
The following models are compatible:
● iPodT 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3
or later)
● iPodT Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
● iPodT Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
● iPodT Nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
● iPodT Nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPodT Nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3PC or later)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 218 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● iPodT Nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0PC or later)
Make sure that your iPodT firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
● Artists
● iPodT Nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.0.2PC or later)
Audio main operation:
● Songs
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the CD·AUX or iPodT
MENU button repeatedly to switch to the iPodT
mode.
● Podcasts
If the audio system is turned off while the iPodT is
playing, the iPodT plays when the audio system is
turned back on.
● Audiobooks
● iPodT Nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
● iPodT Nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.2PC or later)
● iPodT Nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.1PC or later)
● iPodT Touch - 1st generation (firmware version 2.2.1 or later)
● iPodT Touch - 2nd generation (firmware version 2.2.1 or later)
● iPodT Touch - 3rd generation (firmware version 3.1.3 or later)
● iPodT Touch - 4th generation (firmware version 4.3.5 or later)
● iPhoneT 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
● iPhoneT 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later)
● iPhoneT 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
● iPhoneT 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
If the audio system is off, pressing the CD·AUX or
iPodT MENU button turns the audio system on
and plays the iPodT.
If the audio system is on, the audio system automatically begins playing tracks from the iPodT
when it is plugged into the jack.
iPodT MENU button:
Press the iPodT MENU button while the iPodT is
connected to show the iPodT operation menu on
the audio display. Scroll through the menu list
using the TUNE·SCROLL control dial. Press ENTER to select a menu item. Items in the iPodT
menu appear on the display in the following order:
● iPadT (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
● Now playing
● iPadT 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
● Playlists
● Albums
● Genres
● Composers
● Shuffle songs
For more information about each item, see the
iPodT Owner’s Manual.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
or
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons
skip backward or forward one track.
to
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 219 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
REPEAT (RPT):
connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position.
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodT can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
To disconnect the iPodT from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPodT.
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are repeated.
* iPodT is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
Compatibility
RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle →
Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be
played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will
be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
BACK button:
When the BACK button is pressed, it returns to
the previous menu.
LHA2264
iPodT* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPodT
To connect an iPodT to the vehicle so that the
iPodT can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located on the center console below the heater
and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPodTspecific end of the cable to the iPodT and the
USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the
vehicle. If your iPodT supports charging via a
USB connection, its battery will be charged while
The following models are compatible:
● iPodT 5th Generation (firmware version
1.2.3 or later)
● iPodT Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 or
later)
● iPodT Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 or
later)*
● iPodT Nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
● iPodT Nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPodT Nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 220 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● iPodT Nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
AUX button:
When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPodT connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPodT is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the
iPodT mode.
● iPodT Nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPodT may not be fully
functional.
Make sure that your iPodT firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
LHA1494
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPodT mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPodT
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPodT.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 221 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Playlists
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the iPodT. When the repeat mode is
icon is displayed to the left of
active, the
the song title or album name to denote which
repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat
icon
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no
is displayed.
● Artists
● Albums
● Genres
● Songs
● Composers
Seek buttons:
● Audiobooks
● Podcasts
Random and repeat play mode:
LHA1495
Interface:
The interface for iPodT operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPodT interface. Use the touchscreen,
BACK button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
navigate the menus on the screen.
When the iPodT is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to bring up the iPodT interface.
Depending on the iPodT model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPodT Owner’s Manual.
While the iPodT is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPodT. When the random mode is
active, the
icon is displayed to the left of
the song title or album name to denote which
random pattern is applied. To cancel Random
mode, touch the “Random” key until no
icon is displayed.
Press the seek button
or
backward or forward one track.
to skip
Press and hold the seek button
or
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse
or fast forward the track being played. The track
plays at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 222 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
BLUETOOTHT STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(Type A) (if so equipped)
If you have a compatible BluetoothT audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.
Audio main operation
Connecting BluetoothT audio
Use the vehicle audio controls or the BluetoothT
device’s controls to play, pause, skip or reverse
tracks.
To connect your BluetoothT audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
LHA2279
1. Press the
button. The system announces the available commands.
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch and hold the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the
number or letter to jump to in the list and then
press the ENTER button.
2. Say “Connect Phone”. The system acknowledges the command and announces the
next set of available commands.
Scrolling menus:
If no character is selected after two seconds, the
display returns to normal.
4. When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
3. Say “Add Phone”. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset. The
connecting procedure of the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone
model. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
To switch to the BluetoothT audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the BluetoothT
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
BLUETOOTHT STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(Type B) (if so equipped)
If you have a compatible BluetoothT audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 223 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
LHA2257
LHA2274
To connect your BluetoothT audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
3. Select the “Add Telephone or Device” key.
This same screen can be accessed to remove, replace or select a different
BluetoothT device.
Connecting BluetoothT audio
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
4. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.
LHA2292
Audio main operation
To switch to the BluetoothT audio mode, press
the CD•AUX button repeatedly until the
BluetoothT audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the BluetoothT audio are displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for
play and the Preset 4 button for pause.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 224 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
BLUETOOTHT STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible BluetoothT audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.
LHA2253
Connecting BluetoothT audio
LHA2248
3. Select the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
To connect your BluetoothT audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the “Settings” key.
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 225 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The controls for the BluetoothT audio are displayed on the screen.
The latest PandoraT application should be installed on the phone.
PANDORAT AUDIO (United States
only) (if so equipped)
The vehicle’s audio system is capable of playing
audio streaming through a compatible, USBconnected audio device using the PandoraT music service.
Connecting a device for use with
PandoraT audio
LHA2265
4. Select the “Connect New Device” key.
5. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.
Audio main operation
To switch to the BluetoothT audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the BluetoothT
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
Devices capable of streaming PandoraT audio
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
via the USB input jack. The USB input jack is
located on the center console beneath the heater
and air conditioner controls. Once connected,
the PandoraT controls will be displayed on the
control panel display screen.
Compatibility
The following iPhoneT models are compatible
with the system:
● iPhoneT 3G
● iPhoneT 3GS
● iPhoneT 4
● iPhoneT 4S
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 226 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
The controls for the PandoraT audio are displayed on the screen. Touch the keys on the
screen to play or pause the audio. Touch the key
key to select
to select “thumbs up” or the
“thumbs down”.
NOTE:
There is a limit of six skips per station per
” (thumbs down) is given
hour. If a “
after the skip limit has been reached, the
current track will continue to play but the
feedback will be saved.
LHA2283
Models without Navigation System
Audio main operation
Models without Navigation System:
To switch to the PandoraT audio mode, press the
CD-AUX button repeatedly until the PandoraT
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the PandoraT audio are displayed on the screen. Press the audio preset 3
button to pause or play the music.
”
Press the audio preset 5 button to select “
(thumbs up). Press the audio preset 4 button to
select “
” (thumbs down).
LHA2269
Models with Navigation System:
NOTE:
There is a limit of six skips per station per
” (thumbs down) is given
hour. If a “
after the skip limit has been reached, the
current track will continue to play but the
feedback will be saved.
Models with Navigation System:
To switch to the PandoraT audio mode, press the
AUX button repeatedly until the PandoraT audio
mode is displayed on the screen.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 227 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
LHA2270
PandoraT audio settings (models with
Navigation System only)
To adjust the PandoraT audio settings, select the
“Menu” key.
● Station List
Select to display a list of available PandoraT
stations.
● Bookmark
Select to bookmark the current station.
LHA0049
CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Delete Station
Select to remove the current station.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 228 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
SOURCE select switch
Push the source select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 (satellite radio, if so
equipped) → XM2 (satellite radio, if so equipped)
→ XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD* →
USB/iPodT* (if so equipped) → BluetoothT Audio* → AUX* → AM.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or
connected to the system.
LHA2266
1. Source select and power on switch
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
3.
(Back) switch
4. Volume control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.
AM and FM:
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
Menu control
switch/ENTER button
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.
For most audio sources, tilting the switch
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a
different function than a tilting up/down for less
than 1.5 seconds.
● Press the ENTER button to show the list of
preset stations.
XM (if so equipped):
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
● Press the ENTER button to show the XM
Menu.
iPodT (if so equipped):
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the iPod
Menu.
CD:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 229 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
AUX:
● Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
ANTENNA
USB (if so equipped):
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
BluetoothT Audio (if so equipped):
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the current song.
PandoraT Audio (if so equipped):
● Tilt up for less than 1.5 seconds to input
“thumbs up” for the current song.
● Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
Menu.
Window antenna
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
CAUTION
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
● A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of
cellular phones while driving.
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
● Tilt down for less than 1.5 seconds to input
“thumbs down” for the current song.
● Tilt up for more than 1.5 seconds to skip to
the next song (if the maximum of six skips per
station per hour has not been exceeded).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 230 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 231 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other BluetoothT devices. If
your phone does not connect automatically
to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s
Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to 5 different BluetoothT
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
LHA2289
Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 232 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the BluetoothT wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTHt is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the BluetoothT Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 233 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Initialization
Giving voice commands
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
button is
which takes a few seconds. If the
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the
button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
● In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
button on the steering
wheel.
● To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
press the
button and after the tone
say, “Call Redial.”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 234 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six two zero zero”
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Special Number” command and the “Send” command during a
call).
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section for more information.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Number” command).
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 235 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
LHA2273
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the BluetoothT HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
button to initiate
Press the
a VR session or answer an incoming call.
PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition system is active, press and hold
button for 5 seconds to
the
quit the Voice Recognition system
at any time.
ENTER button / tuning switch
While using the Voice Recognition system, tilt the tuning switch
up or down to manually control
the phone system. Press the ENTER button to select an option on
the display screen.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
Choosing a language
You can interact with the BluetoothT Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
2. The system announces: “Press the
) button for the
PHONE/SEND (
hands-free phone system to enter the voice
adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END
) button to select a different lan(
guage.”
3. Press the
button.
For information on voice adaptation, see
“Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 236 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
press the PHONE/SEND (
) button. To
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch (
or
) up or down.
NOTE:
You must press the
button within 5
seconds to change the language.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
D.
phone s
Main Menu
“Connect phone” s
“Add phone” s
Initiate from handset s
Name phone s
button on the steering
1. Press the
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
A . The system ac2. Say: “Connect phone” s
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
B . The system acknowl3. Say: “Add phone” s
edges the command and asks you to initiate
C.
connecting from the phone handset s
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
“Call” s
“Phone Number” s
Speak the digits s
“Dial” s
button on the steering
1. Press the
wheel. A tone will sound.
A . The system acknowledges
2. Say: “Call” s
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
B . The system ac3. Say “Phone Number” s
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 237 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Say: “Special Number” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
C . If the
the area code in single digit format s
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Number”. See “How to say numbers” in this section for more information.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the
button
on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
“Call”
Main Menu
Main Menu
“Call”
“Call”
(Speak name) s
“Phonebook”
“Phone Number”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
D . The system acknowledges
6. Say: “Dial” s
the command and makes the call.
When you press and release the
button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub-menu.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
Receiving a call
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
(Speak Digits) s
“Special Number” s
“Redial” s
“Call Back” s
(Speak name) s
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 238 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
“Call Back” s
If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the location.
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.
(Speak Digits) s
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the VR session.
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
“Special Number” s
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
“Redial” s
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
button on the steering
available. Press the
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands.
● “Help” — The system announces the available commands.
● “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR session and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the BluetoothT Hands-Free System,
press the
button.
● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 239 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
“Transfer Entry” s
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“Transfer Entry” s
“Delete Entry” s
“List Names” s
For phones that do not support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP BluetoothT profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manually add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the BluetoothT communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” s
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system recognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“List Names” s
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 240 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record name” in this section.
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
NOTE:
NOTE:
“Recent Calls”
The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving.
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
Speak a Name
“List Names” s
“Record Name” s
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP BluetoothT profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the BluetoothT system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Outgoing” s
“Incoming” s
“List Names” s
“Missed” s
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record name” command in this section for information about recording custom voice tags for list
entries that the system has difficulty pronouncing.
“Record Name” s
Use the Recent Calls command to access outgoing, incoming or missed calls.
“Outgoing” s
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
“Incoming” s
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
“Missed” s
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 241 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
“Connect Phone”
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
“Delete Phone” s
To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook
Download”. When the command is recognized,
“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio
display.
“Display Settings” s
“Select Phone” s
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.
“Delete Phone” s
“Replace Phone” s
Use the Display Settings command to control
where incoming call notifications are displayed in
the vehicle. Say “Driver Only” to have call notifications shown on the vehicle information display
only. Say “Both” to have call notifications shown
on both the vehicle information display and the
center audio display.
Use the Replace Phone command to replace an
existing phone pairing with a new phone. The
system will keep all voice tags assigned to your
phonebook.
To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook
Download”. When the command is recognized,
“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio
display.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
“Add Phone” s
“Replace Phone” s
“Bluetooth OFF” s
“Phonebook Download OFF” s
“Display Settings” s
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the BluetoothT function on the vehicle.
“Bluetooth OFF” s
VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE
Use the Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a
wireless connection to your phone.
“Add Phone” s
“Phonebook Download OFF” s
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
Use the Phonebook Download OFF command to
turn off the automatic downloading of the handset phonebook to the available (if supported by
the cellular phone). When the command is recognized, “Sync Contacts OFF” will appear on the
audio display.
Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect
users to train the system to improve recognition
accuracy. By repeating a number of commands,
the users can create a voice model of their own
voice that is stored in the system. The system is
capable of storing a different voice adaptation
model for each connected phone.
“Select Phone” s
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 242 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND (
) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the voice
adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END
) button to select a different lan(
guage.”
5. Press the
button.
For information on selecting a different language, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system.
7. When preparation is complete and you are
button.
ready to begin, press the
● transfer entry
8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
● delete all entries
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that voice adaptation has been completed and the system is
ready.
The VA mode will stop if:
● eight pause nine three two pause seven
● call seven two four zero nine
● phonebook delete entry
● next entry
● dial star two one seven oh
● yes
● no
button is pressed for more than 5
● The
seconds in VA mode.
● The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.
● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
● select
● missed
● dial eight five six nine two
● Bluetooth on
Training phrases
● outgoing
During the VA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
● call three one nine oh two
● phonebook transfer entry
● dial three oh four two nine
● delete call back number
● nine seven pause pause three oh eight
● cancel
● call back number
● call star two zero nine five
● delete phone
● incoming
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 243 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● dial eight three zero five one
MANUAL CONTROL
● record name
While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
) button. At that
holding the PHONE/END (
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
) button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
● four three pause two nine pause zero
● delete redial number
● phonebook list names
● call eight oh five four one
● correction
● connect phone
● dial seven four oh one eight
● previous entry
● delete
● dial nine seven two six six
● call seven six three oh one
● go back
● call five six two eight zero
● dial six six four three seven
● To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END (
) button. If the current
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
PHONE/END (
) button will exit the
Phone system.
● To exit the manual control mode, press and
) button for 5
hold the PHONE/END (
seconds.
Operating tips
● To enter manual control mode, start the
Voice Recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
speak 9Showing Manual Options9 when
manual controls are initially activated.
● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. Depending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
● To select the current menu option, press the
) button.
PHONE/SEND (
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 244 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Symptom
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 245 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
LHA2290
Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 246 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other BluetoothT devices. If
your phone does not connect automatically
to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s
Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to 5 different BluetoothT
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the BluetoothT wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 247 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTHt is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the BluetoothT Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
button is
which takes a few seconds. If the
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the
button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
button on the
also press and hold the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 248 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
● In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
button on the steering
wheel.
● To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
press the
button and after the tone
say, “Call Redial.”
LHA2273
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the BluetoothT HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
button to initiate
Press the
a VR session or answer an incoming call.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system is active, press and hold
button for 5 seconds to
the
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
To connect a phone to the BluetoothT HandsFree Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 249 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate the
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System. Press
the
button and say “Phone” to bring up the
phone command menu. The available options
are:
● Call
● Phonebook
● Recent Calls
● Send Text
LHA2257
LHA2274
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER button.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Add Phone or Device” and then press the
ENTER button.
4. When a message with a PIN appears on the
screen, operate the BluetoothT phone to
enter the PIN.
The connecting procedure varies according to
each phone. See the phone’s Owner’s Manual
for
details.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular
phones.
● Read Text
● Select Phone
“Call”
For more information on the “Call” command, see
“Making a call” in this section.
“Phonebook”
The following commands are available under
“Phonebook”:
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 250 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The
system will say the name it interpreted based
on the voice command provided. If the name
is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another
name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is identified, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that number.
Say “Record Name” to record a name for the
phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to
delete a recorded name for the phonebook
entry.
● List Names
Speak this command to have the system list
the names in the phonebook one by one
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the
list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to
record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook
entry.
● Transfer Entry
This command can be used to transfer multiple contacts at a time. To enable manual
contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook
Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The
ability to transfer contacts via the OPP
Bluetooth profile depends on your mobile
phone. See your phone’s Owner’s Manual
for details and instructions.
● Delete Entry
Speak this command to delete an entry in
the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete
by speaking the desired name or say “List
Names”.
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under
“Recent Calls”:
● Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the incoming call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.
● Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.
● Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the outgoing call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
● Redial
Speak this command to call the last number
dialed.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Z REVIEW COPY—2013 Altima Sedan (asd)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/24/12—dmoore X
JOBNAME: 1093929-2013-asd-own PAGE: 251 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Mar 27 10:39:14 2012
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Send Text / Read Text”
For more information on these commands, see
“Text messaging” in this section.
“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to use
from a list of those phones connected to the
vehicle.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System:
● Press the
button.
● The system will prompt you for a command.
● Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:
● “(a name)” – Speak the name of a phonebook entry to place a call to that entry. The
system will respond with the name it interpreted from your command and will prompt
you to confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear another name from the phonebook.
● “Number” – Speak this command to place a
call by inputting numbers.
For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak
the numbers. When finished, say “Dial” to
initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time
in the process to correct a misspoken or
misinterpreted number.
For phone numbers with more digits or special characters, say “Special Number”, then
speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be
entered. Available special characters are
“star”, “pound”, “plus” and “pause”. When
finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say
“Correction” at any time in the process to
correct a misspoken or misinterpreted number or character.
● “Redial” – Speak this command to dial the
number of the last outgoing call. The system
will display “Redialing ”.
The name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.
● “Call Back” –Speak this command to dial the
number of the last incoming call. The system
will display “Calling back 
Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
About                           : 4b3887d0-b037-11ec-0000-91065fe0e217
Producer                        : GPL Ghostscript 8.63
Modify Date                     : 2012:07:11 10:10:40+02:00
Create Date                     : 2012:03:27 10:40:06-04:00
Creator Tool                    : XyEnterprise XPP 8.3C.1  SP #2
Metadata Date                   : 2012:07:11 10:10:40+02:00
Document ID                     : 4b3887d0-b037-11ec-0000-91065fe0e217
Instance ID                     : uuid:baadcc5b-2db2-4d8d-95c5-f14eeb5299f2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 1093929-2013-asd-own
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 403
Creator                         : XyEnterprise XPP 8.3C.1  SP #2
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: YBN-LCN20A

Navigation menu